Home

Dodge 2009 Caliber Automobile User Manual

Contents

1. 236 349 Air Pressure Tires 0 000000 cee 284 DAS wound asad xp Pues bate awa a ae ts 49 Rita Deploy menl riers dp minda gee aes DEE 57 AD LODE ook Geese me oes ie are d 59 75 H 1 Dia Maintenance s ss aas 25 pid wa 2 204 eee Ee 4 59 P Da EES E EET EE EE N 55 Airbag Window Side Curtain 50 A AE M 171 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio aaaea aaa 251 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 354 377 378 Capacities MATER ETE OE OE OE old Disposal uupceneu seed 3p egi i9 ewe hem d 357 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 266 Anti Lock Warning LIGNE uoce em deeds 1 7 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearance Gate avo eee teed Ros 4 hoe ND 362 EE tie TOWING ao uice esce 9 3 SCR eee dC Sen aac el 98 Automatic Dimming MIFTOE lt ses eue ke m e 80 Automatic Door Locks 05 28 29 Automatic Transaxle 12 249 253 325 361 Fluid Level Check sie 285 a654464 9d Rege 361 Interlock Systemi 42464445445 VREDE ER AR ED i 255 verlede sui se Tue a od oo BERE HD ee EE 325 Selection Or Lubricant ie eed ER Rope s 361 N INDEX 411 LE LARR ET eae sone 255 pecial dIE S a agora daea E E BR ed 3 oie 361 ws serg ioia aia DO E ER sas 257 DONG a2 64 5 200 45 fania Pd e 348 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Belts Seat EERS OORSESE ER ER ER OE 73 Dev
2. 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 12a vum ee ER OE 157 Tit Steering CODI ss sus d emp PE Rew 134 Tire and Loading Information Placard 279 Tire Identification Number TIN 278 JUS Mrkos uad aueh tuse 0 593 9x d EE suas 274 Tite Safety Information sv 4 5 44 x doe rhe s 274 THES id sap ELSA RARR E RENE AD 73 283 406 Aging Lile ol TIS amp acad eesdesmrkesbertes 289 ANT UE sos Gea red ed ueexS eS pa 283 icu Pr 20 CDD IHE s 25 Re KP ue TE RD AE S E RE 926 Compact Date oos 4 aaa KA d V a4 d eee ee S 286 DISPENSE IDE as se WARD eee eS Ms 331 General Information ER ER RES s 283 TEM 424 INDEX NEE Id ik eed os MERE ae Gon oe aq eee be 285 Inflation Pressures 2 2 9 045420004 ma 284 or 326 Lleol TICS TP TREER DEE oe we 289 Load COpaciby 2 05544 desde doe EEd RE PS PA Pressure Monitor System TPMS 293 Pressure Warning LICK 126 ede ie ERES 172 OU GIA keserek PES dT P TP 406 Ch DR 286 KOPCEM o3 wacu ORE heen SA 999 RAS 290 RODOR PPP n 292 ale a kaha yee eee neha pens RUM RR 274 283 oi ASTE ORE ene etae tpawe eugene aes 276 Snow dies fae snoa deus ee bee Spa Wee a en 291 de ei ues cred OE TRUE E S E IE E 326 APIE ay ore tee qoe cage AS ae a M OR 288 Tread Wear Indicators amp ius Re xs 288 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 314 TOV NE 2 pv2 wg PR S Red BA ME HORE E 310 24 Hour Towing
3. 229 Schedule Maintenance leen 382 Seat Belt Maintenance sae sis diem HE Geen es 368 Deal bell Keminder PPP A7 Bcd Bells ayere rra eee eh oe ee eee o quu pud oe 73 Adjustable Shoulder Belt se 20 act hrs 42 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 42 And Pregnant Women su ads waaay eat ee S 48 Child Resta usibus cette E gee RES 62 Front Seat 422 INDEX NEE Id Li PEEHOR 1 30 0o Oeo ee eee HR RAN S 73 Pretensioners xu uoo RR ea eR Rode 33d 46 Rear Sato cio ebb wag DOER EE deo eee ees 37 Seat Belts Sedan lens 36 vo M 524 ha Se woke eee AAS be ee eee ee Se ES 117 AUSENTE Voceees eeu ee dee oe peed os 117 Head Restraints ss SS ss 120 LIGdPeud pepret eree ES DERDE S bu E mi 120 Lumbar SUDDORU 32s aru sok Se ORR ee RES 119 Redt FOID 22584 ag ER de N EER EED Pr de pn 123 Kear Folding Sedan ux eine beg 123 Seatback Release lesen 119 llo PF REK ER ORE ELIA He oe DE 119 Security Alarm Ihet Alarm uu et ted OR d gor des 18 Selection of Oil oeste SO EERS S 345 Deniny Kev nNHODIHZGE ez vas e soe WEES ME ED 15 Sentry Key Programming 0 17 Sentry Key Replacement vasca e Seem des 16 Service Assistance ee eee eee 401 Service Contract Y seu RD EER OORREDENDE 403 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator lesen 75 Service Manuals 43649 de EO R ng 405 Setting the Clock ee mes FAR RR 192 206 209 219 5erine
4. WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 pin and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s wiring harness STARTING AND OPERATING 319 The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations O70 6 O O S 057003765 v T k Yi bd M V 7 Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 057003768 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Pin Connector 4 Electric Brakes Female Pins 4 Park 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 320 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in 1st gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage E
5. 32 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 48 D Power Window Switches 32 5 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag 49 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 EC Inlet Restrainis a uns ade ea eae BE OER emess 62 Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 70 ES pS EE EE RETE ee 71 CT 71 D Transporting Passengers OExhatst GaS a ues bees g bee Ge N 72 O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The bond 2242224402604 SEA HARARE HEER ER O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 1638e5a8 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission If Equipped 1 Place the shift lever in PARK 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY A START NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tem porarily in the ignition switch cy
6. B fTbc4b Shift Pattern Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transaxle is in 1st gear not 3rd when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in 3rd gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations 5th gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transaxle lubri cant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy CAUTION it should be upshifted as listed in the following table If you skip more than one gear while downshifting Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds Units in mph km h or downshift at too high a vehicle speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch Engine e 1102 2t03 3to4 4to5 To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift Size ats down to 2nd or 1st gear when descending a steep grade All En 14 23 23 37 29 47 45 72 When turning a corner or driving up a steep gr
7. Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPARS Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents
8. sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the ignition has been turned OFF The sunroof operation will be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during the 45 second time period 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There is a standard 12 Volt power outlet located in the instrument panel for added convenience This outlet can power cell phones electronics and other low power devices N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNINCG CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods
9. 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure 298 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The
10. Et ooliis IE seke qon AK OAR RR 353 O Prake SYSE vas eee ds Geen e genet WAAI 359 D Automatic Transaxle CVT If Equipped 361 o Manual Transaxle If Equipped 362 D Appearance Care And Protection From ONOSIOM 2 Gave SA Soe oe pa eae d dot 362 NE C ER OE EEN 368 O Integrated Power Module IPM 368 Mi Vehicle Storage iss ss meer 371 W Replacement Bulbs SE SS Se 971 W Bulb Replacement esses 372 3 Headlights Front Parking Front T r ole AA OES EER AE ac d Un 372 Hos Lie lis FTT 972 o Tail Lights Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights 25 edd EE DT E Ee ET ER Ed 373 lesse LIEG gaunt pees4 KELDER BEES 975 O Center High Mounted Stoplight 376 W Fluids And Capacities lle 377 W Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 378 BE o PC EET ad 378 EG EENS saer cause Pad aa tree ae ARE Ad 379 N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Battery Under Cover 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Air Cleaner Filter 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 070305528 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Battery 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Ca
11. e V m WA oja c VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution there fore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most freguent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC o m O c INTRODUCTION isi 4496084544 EK om MR ME Se
12. them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3 3 There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts the rear ones by two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be Jacking Locations placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped
13. 1 800 505 1300 NN IFYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 403 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please r
14. 8 km h BeltAlert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following procedure NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s or front passenger s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s or front passenger s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout the
15. SERE RENEE ER SS DE DEERE EERS USES aan Ix E V TET z EEEE EEIEIEE ETETETT EEEE NS CUE EEEE EEES EEEE EE EEE EE oe ar EE 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise iau HERE lll Tee eee tet RS oe rd Sa ee OE RE ete a Sree elf POLL AREA EE t RR RE EA ee BARE ads ws sis ie Ee PES po PES T E BE Vt N RR BR IIS meyers Me RE N MAR 33 13 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Pull the bulb from the socket ta PE T IM Soe e TESSAA NSE E E EEE EA E ee eee eet E E PELLE SAAME A I SE DEE Ee SS SS S A SA E E E E E KAAN SS A DRR RE RR OR E SN SES S N SEA SA E RE RR RR E S S A SSSA SA a t aut mm Ss a enter High Mounted Stoplight The light is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement E MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES 515 Liters Engine Oil with Filter o 4 26 Liters Cooling System S S O 2 0L and 2 4L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirem
16. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pre
17. When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 7 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 8 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for seven seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 9 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 16 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 10 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when d
18. You could be crushed Never put any part of your body Jack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor in the cargo area under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Continued NN WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 327 Spare Tire Removal Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transaxle or REVERSE manual transaxle 4 Turn OFF the ignition 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel N N NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WA
19. airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next 10 Remum nf i i I TIR to a window If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags they are located above the side windows Their f covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG S ae it 7 jo Side Curtain Airbag Location NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not put anything on or around the airbag e If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do covers or attempt to manually open them You may not attach cup holders or any other objects on or damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you These protective covers for the airbag cushions are around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the object into occupants causing serious injury designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts Along with seat belts and pretensioners front airbags work with the driver inflatable knee blocker and the integrated passenger knee blocker non inflatable to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant p
20. inside of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in this section of the Owner s Manual for the underhood location of the IPM Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse ed Empt Empty EE 15 Amp AWD 4WD ECU Lt Blue Feed 10 Amp CHMSL Brake Switch Red Feed E 10 Amp Ignition Switch Feed Red OCM D 20Amp Trailer Tow Yellow 10 Amp IOD Sw Pwr Mir Red Steering Cntrl Sdar Hands Free Phone 7 30 Amp IOD Sensel Green MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 avity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 30 Amp IOD Sense2 15 Amp IGN Run Acc Dome Green Lt Blue Lamp Sunroof Rear 40 Amp Power Seats Wiper Motor ACC Green Inverter 0 Amp CCN Power Locks 10 Amp IOD Feed Mod Wcm Yellow Interior Lighting Red 20 Amp Ign Run Acc Inverter 20 Amp PWR Amp 1 amp Amp Yellow Yellow 2 Feed 15 Amp Power Outlet ASD Relay Contact Lt Blue PWR Feed 20 Amp Pwr Run Acc Outlet 15 Amp IOD Feed Radio Yellow RR Dome Lamp Lt Blue Cigar Lighter 10 Amp IOD Feed Intrus 10 Amp IOD CCN Red Mod Siren If Red Equipped 1 40 Amp RAD Fan Relay Bat 10 Amp IGN RUN Heat AC Green tery Feed Red Compass Sensor C 10 11 12 13 14 9 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse EM Lt Blue 3 Red Relay Control If Lt Blue 2 mM aa ABS Valve Feed 10 Amp IGN RUN Only ORC Red Feed mE ABS Pump Feed 10 Amp IGN RUN ORC OCM Red Feed Headlamp Washer Hot C
21. or for longer than 30 seconds With Ignition Key continuously without stopping when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground e All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles must be towed on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground Automatic Transaxle NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result Manual Transaxle e Front Wheel Drive FWD or All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated e FWD or AWD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground All Transaxles If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL CAUTION e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACC position not in the LOCK position Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper to
22. ord E B17t0ad7 WARNING Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on the driver s door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle the power door lock switch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key 021806187 Driver Power Door Lock Switch 1 Unlock 2 Lock Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Veh
23. repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches o45003751 Remote Sound System Controls Back View of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocke
24. tions for cleaning e Cuts off fuel to the engine e Turnson the interior lights which remain on as long as e t is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the the battery has power or until the ignition Key is airbags have deployed If you are involved in another removed collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli e Unlocks the doors automatically sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Maintaining Your Airbag System Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in an impact While AN the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you Do not modify the components or e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers wiring including adding any kind of badges or during the six to eight seconds when the ignition stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the switch is first turned on upper passenger SIME ol N meent panei Do e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval not modify the front bumper vehicle body st
25. Assistance 98 Disabled Vehide 4 iii bre d EER ER RR S 334 Son A P 915 es uie id ROEI SERE PRESE VETERES SAI rj i 244 gata een DE SUE READ RR EA EED 313 TOWING ASS ange spa od ae bee ERES BE PESE 98 licor RR NE 299 er TON 22550 a prios dur N ER PRE 310 Cooling System Tips sace ere ecd et d 320 PEDO ot Es RE ME RAND HR SBA DE EER a 312 Minimum Keduitements siess erwuesse RE eats 315 Trailer and Tongue Weight 314 bsp AL TES EE EE EO 318 Taler WE Gde vsureq idet que xoa red 919 hille Well 2haacaan ee ceed eee SARA ded Rn 215 cunc de sie oS ae RAD ME a OG MED N oe 299 Automatic eee 12 249 253 361 hinc P 257 Manual 2 399099 9 ene 8 2 2 EERE 14 249 251 N INDEX 425 OPCtAOM ME nee nies 256 Oerder Sor ken ee DR ENS DRS 257 Selection of Bubrieabil sees ebore PR dms 361 Transmission Rance Indicator gsi s ces her ad LE PR REPE 172 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless FOUY iu KERRIES guns 29 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 138 JIOGDSDOPUDE Vels sser ere te beans ena eee des 70 Tread Wear Indicators si ike si EYE xx ges 288 Tip Odom ICT e acu scs HER RUP PCS RE os PRE ARE 174 Trip Odometer Reset Button is essem mn 176 Ton IONS a exo ooo EE EE T See 128 177 373 uconnect Hands Free Phone 83 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 166 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 406 Universal Trans
26. Character Dip Program Type No program type or un defined noue Jazz Jazz News News N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between n playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing
27. Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 m
28. ERA EDE 331 TOWNE 23 ccocuaneneeees eee noes a ees 334 Emission Control System Maintenance 342 382 ENNIO S64 engl eee 49 350 yesh ers FEE ORDE 340 Break In Recommendations 70 Checking Oil evel seres dora Panes a hed ees 344 Soon A es a homed e a E ER N 353 Exhaust Gas Caution SS 72 305 Fuel Requirements ua descenso doe do Eee EER 301 SOEKENDE es du x co PERE EE RAAS Po e RS 331 Ol P 344 377 378 OU Else DIERON ies pees haus edad aa Vi 345 EL illei COP ees oon concen de ad MR RR 340 346 OF ier 8229 92 99 392 95 4 NODE ME Ri 378 Ol Selec ON ss 244445 REK RR ARE RS ere ira 345 OILS UBEISUG sei TA ER ED ER EE 346 a run MERE OE ES EK 324 Temperaire Gialige re cu ats ee ea es 169 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 58 Event Data Recorder een 59 Exhaust Gas Caution 35 72 305 351 352 Exhaust Svsteld sis greitt AE RR 3 6055 4 72 391 OE di LAE EO EET EE DEE 7A Filler Location Fuel 4 222 222 was bes HE RE Me 169 Filters Ait Cleaner 023 ee ek eens hha ean std woes 347 Engine X Il ss vnus god dor RUE OP ness aes 347 378 lta c ERNETET TTTT TTE TRITT 324 Hazard Warning 2426 qx d ede 3pm eden hopes 324 TOt SIS Du ioc se CU ee n EE RR ed x 74 177 373 Flat Tire SO OE sisses C5 Roe este RR rd dar s 291 Hooded Ene ine Staring e essare xm Ob te 250 Fluid Brake 24444446268 4445 Erre SS PES 379 Fite dpaeities a3 canine hae De de Re Hs 377 Phd Leaks 2
29. Fuel Filler Cap Message 307 W Vehicle Loading 307 O Vehicle Certification Label 308 Mile DOWD ass oes RE EER WE ENS E EA 310 O Common Towing Definitions 310 O Installing A Trailer Hitch 912 O Trailer Hitch Classification 312 H Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings O Trailer And Tongue Weight 314 O lowing Requirements c eed RE RS s 315 EVTOWING LIPS ie ROER SPR IDEE REDE 320 Bl Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 0 4 321 0 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Cun PEDRO ER EE EE RE DT 321 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift lever in NEUTRAL NOTE e The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor e If the key will not turn and the s
30. GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR L
31. M A N T z N A N C 3 S C H 3 D U L 3 S 0 396 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or Schedule 150 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule d H Rotate tires I Change the engine oil and engine oil _J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary JJ Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter I Replace the spark plugs except 2 4L Inspect the CV joints PZEV Inspect exhaust system L1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 5046 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T 3 N A N C E S C H 3 D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE S
32. Mirror 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the dimming feature is activated mirror clean Outside Mirror Driver s Side Adjust the flat drivers side outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the door glass Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Adjust the convex passenger side outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the nidis center of the vehicle Automatic Dimming Mirror N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING Power Mirrors If Equipped The control for the power mirrors is located on the Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side drivers door trim panel convex mirror will look smaller and farther away P T than they really are Relying too much on your MERE TA NAAA passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other ob
33. NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at h
34. Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro tection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emer Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same LN engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Continued Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze gency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id When adding engine coolant antifreeze a minimum solution of 50 recommended MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent in
35. SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc These selections can only be made while playing a DVD VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped VESTM Lock Locks out rear VESTM remote controls if equipped VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio l
36. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high twice for low and a third time to return to off 051814415 Three Press Switch Cargo Cover If Equipped The cargo area trim panels include two notches for mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo dates the reclining rear seat To install the Cargo Cover insert either end of the cover into one of the two notches located in the rear trim panels With one of the cover ends installed push inward on the opposite end and install it into the same notch location of the rear trim panel Ze 035408982 L q Rear Trim Notches 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using the handle pull the cover toward you and guide WARNING the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides of the rear trim panel In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and ud strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Removable Load Floor The cargo area load floor is removable and can be washed with mild soap and water 035406963 Cargo Cover Guides N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNINCG Cargo tie down loops are not safe anchors for a child seat tether st
37. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Low Tire Pressure Display S81Tazbbed Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic NN STARTING AND OPERATING 299 display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressure s have been re ceived The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being receive
38. a second time To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements COOLED BEVERAGE STORAGE BIN GLOVE COMPARTMENT IF EQUIPPED The upper storage bin door swings upward to present the contents of the long shallow bin that can store items out of sight Beneath this bin is the glove compartment The large glove compartment door swings downward and features two levels of storage The upper bin functions as a Cooled Beverage Storage Bin for vehicles equipped with air conditioning for storing up to four 20 oz 1 L bottles or cans When desired cool air enters the com partment to keep the contents cool depending on ambi ent temperature and A C settings Glove Compartment And Cooled Beverage Storage N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 NOTE The use of the Cooled Beverage Storage Bin is for nonperishable beverages only To operate the beverage cooler pull the slide control about 0 5 in 12 mm toward the passenger compartment This will allow cool air to enter the beverage cooler To shut off the beverage cooler when not in use push the slide control back 0 5 in 12 mm This will prevent cool ai
39. also exercise Edit or Delete e Note that only the phonebook in the current language operations at this point is deleted e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be number designation you wish to call deleted or edited e The selected number will be dialed List All Names in the uconnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular ph
40. ani THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE mad Z rri sj e eSI e oL eL Ee Ls Le TABLE OF CONTENTS UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 222000 CONTENTS WM Introduction E How To Use This Manual ll Warnings And Cautions INTRODUCTION Bl Vehicle Identification Number W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed in
41. be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact a discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks only The use of other sized discs may damage the Inserting Compact Disc s CD player mechanism Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into away and jam the player mechanism the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than a second CD if one is already loaded 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the ejected before a new disc can be loaded other side is a CD
42. body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubrication Replace as reguired WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle N MAINTAINING
43. causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with
44. come to a complete stop NEUTRAL The engine may be started in this range DRIVE This should be used for most driving and provides the best ratio for optimum drivability fuel economy and performance AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Automatic ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT and or the engine from overspeed Changes down will only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stall ing 051407169 258 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Operation NOTE Autostick is not functional until the CVT warms up in cold weather Autostick operation is activated in the DRIVE position by moving the shift lever side to side Moving the shift lever to the side will activate Autostick and shift up to the next higher manual ratio unless you are already operating in or near Overdrive in which case 6th ratio will be selected In like manner moving the shift lever to will activate Autostick and shift to the next lower manual ratio After Autosti
45. coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freez ing e f frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is
46. e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re moved 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Flash Light With Lock under Personal Settings
47. end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges NOTE The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling the original wheel prop erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel then install the wheel nuts 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the car
48. files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names n nm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported Th
49. headlights and pull Turn Signal out the end of the multifunction lever urn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows il n on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights pu p x You can signal a lane change by moving the multifunc tion lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent ETA ze Tres 8h EE EE ER ER LEE ma aaron ee dd ME RE EE EE ED CODO ads oi Do iN NEER EE EE ee el EE EN OO wate tne eee Fog Light Control NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 GEE ARE Te M Ee High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever away from vou to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam GEE ARE Re Te S LM fees Pett 7 DEPT Li NAMNSNNENNN NNI TUS NAMNNMMNXNANN TN Rae OPO IE EEE EES zx T oe oe Se E E xe Peete Se NNNM STE Be Ry RA Be UT N He Ma Be Se Re SE b E x E E E x z z z z z z E E 2 i Mau STER BiTBe2da ee ees atts Sees 11313133 Ta IIE vvv T 13 vL I Turn Signal Control Y aoa mee By My Bo Re Be Re Poort PETS If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to
50. i s eet bak EES rak Epi 4464 74 N INDEX 415 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle Ls 361 Power oE ane a id wa p Pd dra s 263 PIGS 2264 EEEE OT EE IG 378 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 378 Log kel cavaseeecee RES ones HR 129 177 372 Folds Beit Seal vec uer d iced qe ta e IP 129 Folding Rear Seat Sedan iss ky RR 45 4056 es 123 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle iu ace saec eo e 333 Front Pos LIGNE ioca 303 ox MERE a debe atx 3 2 PEHel EE E E EES 301 378 ed AE sa DRAKE ER BEDE EER ES EN S 305 Additives as qaaa 45 4 Ren Ghee Poe SHEE WE 304 GpaEl eae gu Gog dae Pie rd E P Nas a Wd 377 accu Prom 302 Piller C ap Gas MP arius eee eee oe 169 305 Filler Door Gas Cap stu Es RES RR cae ne 169 Ee AE EE N ERA EE 301 ER ER OE NE ET 169 ki RE EE EE e teas 170 Ocene RANE ia DERE ee OR Re 301 INCOUITCINGING aseo dre wed VA ELE ER RR PRE 301 ide ie GAAS enone ER RETE 377 Fuel Systemi Caution asses 693 9 Regn 307 FUCHS 3525 6 RE DE RUE S S KNOR RE PAR Usi 305 et MAAT ER ART EE RE TO EE i 268 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 138 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap ssec SNR 305 307 341 Gasoline Clean Air eee 302 Gasoline Fuel sissies 2445 RE EERDER 301 377 Gasoline Reformulated 302 Gauges Coolant Temperature sui e ed gian e 169 ln es sue EE RT EE ee FOK 169 Odometer serpes 452444825 VRESE RAD 174 TIGCBORIPIBE sissies RA RED rac RAE RES 170 C n ROSA SAO N EE SI eeea
51. ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible 24 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System as ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id brakes If the ABS light does not tum on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 25 High Beam Indicator This indicator shows that the headlights are on high beam Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 26 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a proble
52. ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OPE uconnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the PHONE button to begin N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reac
53. light when the multifunction lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is defective TBe275 EI JL PR 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the multifunction lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 30 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror Each light is turned on by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light off The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 8179n0d22 Map Reading Lights NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle The lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF if the door is left open or light is switched on N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights DRL at DRL intensity which is a lower intensity then
54. on the vehicle at the first opportunity 288 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNINCG The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep it inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire plac ard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first oppor tunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck For additional information refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Many states have laws requiring tire replaceme
55. pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is completely extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instruc tions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren WARNING Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER insta
56. prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the pe
57. pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a switchable retractor it will have a distinctive label To operate the switchable retractor please refer to Automatic Locking Retractor ALR in this section e n the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out e If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to
58. recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle 302 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability proble
59. s Personal 4424445 se T ES PRIUS 185 Shift Speeds Manual Transaxle 255 Shoulder Belis os issie bes bei SEE AE LA SNR 97 DIGS iie PP 55 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 244 ione UBL sespe de DRR ecu EE 74 177 373 Slippery Surfaces Driving OR 1s esa RE EE 259 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 291 DOW INNES AE AR AE TONG PUE ee EE 291 oie Tie ia RE S ardere tem ED 286 287 326 Specifications s CT 345 Speed Control Cruise Control 134 176 DDSSGdOmEIBE ix sceau a BEE SEER d Rd EE EE 170 N INDEX 423 Speedometer and Odometer uses vr pda 167 DING 45744 eR SUC eee eh es ee 249 Automatic Transmission 0 4 249 Engine Fails to Start ooste ER HEERS eon 250 Manual Transmission sees 249 Diano Procedures oa ca vire EED ER SISTERE 249 Steering POWOE 31 420 Steed 35 5 VS 43 262 263 TUE COMM Sx hen ae nrw RR USER E a HRS 134 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound SE LS de c coe scura EE EE Hn 234 se RATE AE AE OE RE EIE 371 BUICK EE soe rr herren 333 DUM OOF shneeeeod ieee eee E rue d ue 144 Sun Vis r Extension gt sses esu ote ees wee USE 83 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 49 ovbptbenc Engine Ol a tas REEKS RR RR eee RS 346 THOME 2 45 as dE SEEK Rua pea eee eee xs 170 PAWS soets eee eae HERE ea oe Bae 373 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 169 325 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 66 Theft Alarm Security Alarm
60. sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man with 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 2 000 lbs 907 300 Ibs 136 Trailer Tow Prep Pack age AHC Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds 314 STARTING AND OPERATING Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information under Starting and Operating in Section 5 Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to side which will cause loss of con trol of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch OETONATEF Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or eguipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 CAUTION Continued NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle
61. stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as your injuries in a collision much worse You might necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out P of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted
62. surface of the glass NOTE In cold weather the use of the recircu late position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle Moisture and ice can also accumulate on the inside of the sheet metal and may result in headliner and or electronic component damage For maximum defogging press the recirculation button until recirculate is off Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 5076 concentration is recommended Outside Air Intake When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake directly in front of the wind shield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of vehicle operation 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is at each end of the instrument panel These nonadjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in either the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors STARTING AND OPERATI
63. that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the
64. the brake linings replace if necessary J Rotate tires Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs except 2 4L PZEV Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace the accessory drive belt s O C O O O O O C C L L L M N T 3 N A N C E S C H 3 D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _I Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 395
65. the seats near the floor Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired position RR AAR RI RAD RA m RE EER MEE mananan sa RR on OE VEE Re Se Re Re SE Be NS Front Seat Adjustment 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using the handle on the outboard side of the seat to adjust the WARNING driving position Tm ee simam ETTER EET RR TxsTsTTPD e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured ony Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked eters tee ntt tise nee NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Manual Lumbar If Equipped Driver s Seatback Recline The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard To recline side of the driver s seat To increase or decrease support rotate the handle up or down 1 Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back t
66. tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 15 OdometerlTrip Odometer This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven Also the cluster will display replacing the odometer trip odometer vehicle warning messages such as door gate ajar gASCAP loose gas cap LoW TirE display toggles between LoW and TirE when tire pressure is low and Change Oil message Loose gas cap gASCAP will be displayed from the Odometer Trip Odometer on all models NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the in strument cluster all warnings including door and gATE and Oil Change Required will only be dis played in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center If Equipped in this section Change Oil Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN p
67. transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver stopping ability Module e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even and to maintain the proper pressure if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light e Receiver Module The TPMS consists of the following components 296 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
68. unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names n nm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate 216 UNDERSTANDIN
69. vehicle you must install a MOPAR spare tire hold down kit The kit will allow you to properly secure the spare tire and jack assembly WARNING Do not operate the vehicle without a properly se cured tire and jack assembly Any loose items may be thrown forward in a collision or hard stop and strike occupants causing serious or fatal injury Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain NN STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Ta ler Hitch Classification Definitions All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry your vehicle Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 lbs 907 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 5 The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 1 2 0L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man 22
70. water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are antici pated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the syst
71. 1 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK the manual transmis sion in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition to OFF for both vehicles 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 3 Using the two finger screws on the cover remove the air intake duct covering the battery 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis charged battery NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 WARNINCG e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over the battery when attaching the clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in your eyes or on your skin flush the contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact 6 If the vehicle is equipped with a Sentry Key Immo bil
72. 25 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNITI
73. ANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at WWW sirius com or at www siriusc
74. Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard under Tire Safety Information in Section 5 of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occu pants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle Continued e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued 316 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade DARDING Continued When parking apply the parking brake on the tow Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in and will not shift during travel When trailering PARK With a manual transmission shift the transmis cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts sion into REVERSE Always block or choc
75. And Cellular Phones 236 ae LE e Mi Climate Controls EE Se es 236 A Reception Oudl a sca se ROV qoe t BERE RE 231 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning O Operating Instructions uconnect studios vici T C 236 Satellite Mode 231 2 Air Filtration System If Equipped 241 D Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped ss 234 Operate DS oues euo AE e xe N 242 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ee INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Demisters 3 Instrument Cluster 4 Radio Q 9 s G9 e 4 o odio 145 5 Upper Glove Compartment 9 Heated Seat Switches If Equipped 6 Lower Glove Compartment Beverage Cooler If Equipped 10 Hazard Warning Flasher 7 Storage Bins 11 ESP OFF Switch If Equipped 8 Climate Controls NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank 2 Fuel Door Reminder This indicates that the fuel filler door is located EI on the left side of the vehicle 3 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the eng
76. CHEDULES 397 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A N T z N A N C 3 S C H 3 D U L 3 S 0 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your o e T 401 O Prepare For The Appointment 401 ENIEDdIe LEK 1 excede 8 ERU Kad 401 o Be Reasonable With Requests 401 N If You Need Assistance se 401 O Chrysler LLC Customer Center 402 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 402 OIn Mexico Contact 000008 402 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY spe sets 403 ELSOIUICS OGE suem woe in EA HERE E HA 403 N Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 404 B MOPAR Parts e else 404 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 404 O In The 50 United States And Washington DE sis RE ERROR EER ES AR OOR 404 9 Ln Canada 2 565 E RES SR KERR ER DR RE 405 400 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id W Publication Order Forms 405 O iracion Grades ouis cans ca SUR
77. CHEDULES NN Id 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary M A N T 3 N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 387 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule d a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs except 2 4L PZEV Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your ve
78. D OPERATING 285 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds with
79. E ues s 146 riel Protect Override iis pq ES 146 O Venting Sunroof Express 147 O Sunshade Operation 0 147 Enel Dele ou gas SPEED EED Kes DRR 147 O Sunroof Maintenance 147 O Ignition Off Operation eaae se RR ER t 147 N Electrical Power Outlets 148 W Power Inverter If Equipped 150 W Cupholders iusserat ASe NR Re me 152 W Console Features sess 152 la Cargo Area Features ss ss ees 154 o Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Prashant It EQUIPE se ies WAAR gom Pi 154 O Cargo Cover If Equipped usos Ry 156 o Removable Load Floor 2224 ges 156 O Cargo Tie Down Loops s 2x3 o9 4 DR aces 157 3 Fold Down Speakers If Equipped 158 W Rear Window Features se ss ss 158 o Rear Window Wiper Washer 158 O Rear Window Defroster sssi rares vens 159 ll Cooled Beverage Storage Bin Glove Compartment It Equipped i3 civ Ren 160 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A 040407 ORE Adjusting Rearview
80. EATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 send towing assistance tanster call uconnect Tutorial o o tyagain N voice training o oS Work S mobile ew phone settings or phone previous N recordagain medial N 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation fe This Voice Recognition system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death NE U
81. ERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio uconnect phone power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Turn Headlights on with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the uconnect system are confirmed Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Display English or Metric The EVIC odometer and uconnect gps system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until US or METRIC appears to make your selection Automatic Compass Calibration When the vehicle is new the compass may appear e
82. Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be dis played based on the current values in the DTE calcula tion and the current fuel tank level N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Tire Pressure Mon
83. G AND OPERATING 267 WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 3 If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However The ABS light monitors the ABS System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning light and the ABS light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises Thes
84. G AND OPERATING 273 ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 274 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings U S DOT Safety Standards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Tractio
85. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RS
86. G YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MPEG Sampling Freguency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette p
87. ING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button
88. ISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other si
89. In l l some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all e Side Remote Acceleration Sensors If Equipped Always wear your seat belt even though you have e Airbag Warning Light airbags Driver Airbag Continued Front Passenger Airbag 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags Above Side Win dows If Eguipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Seat Belt Reminder Light Knee Impact Bolsters Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker Front Acceleration Sensors Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How The Airbag System Works The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to reguire the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC This ORC will detect roll over The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for six to eight seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned on After
90. Milite rj c c NR Es MSAN AAA e ETER n n n men bb MARA E ESE AA Vemm Ba Be Bar Re Ba Es Ba Aa ER ae By x RKB RR Be He Bo Es Be Ao Be Be By Hy Bo Bo Be Be He BE rrr at ELE F FFFFF x Irc4 NNNNENNNNNRNSNN EE t FFFFFFFF mM Dt oo oor rrr rrr 5 Ane see RR WA DE AA RR EE r FEFFrr MAMARNAN SLUT PIANI IN ea Frrr Mess Re Re RE ER ee Pe Re De Pe Re rr PRERE OE e aokk h ee E ea omma Reg ee ee ee ee EE RE Re ae oe eh EE EE eiii h RE RR quce skin EE EE BR m Sees Sa SoS oe orn nn Ts eres TReTrsTTsDT2IS Tre TSISSS ToeIeTTsTS Toeceqfs20 aerate eee TrecTrsTSO eee tes Tovreqfesrsf feet Tocrrqfs02 teeter Trecrs ID TIS TERE RAEE wae TREER TS ET idis TEE EET EET EE EED EE EE oe n mmm mmm IE T LEDE EET HEAR EE Ee Ee eke RA RR Ad aaa HERE SENSE EEN ER ER Be Re Ee EER ER EED E PEE ETE EEEE EEE DE DE DE EE ED DE Ee REED EE Ee EE EE RR aaa ened LZNZLZLULULLIEEXNNNUEDBNBNIMM RR ecet ee PEPER ER EE EERE EERE SESE D T T T T TA EMt li iiililil In ZZNZZuULuIIDAAEXNNSUNUBNNIMD SERE EE EER EE ER EE EERDER EE EE EE EE EER ESE SERE GEE EDE PRR EP ERE ES ISI SS SIS IRIS IRI CTT 1111121212 UR AE NETENENENE NE SR SR SEDI STPTIA ZZNZZzZZuLUN LIREININILILZZZNENNNNNE ES PEPER ERE EERE EERE EERE REESE ERE R ERE E EEE DEE YI SEN TM eae BREER EERDER ER ER RR RD RD RR EE EE GENEREER EE EE EER GEGEE EG EE mL a z
91. Most of these products contain high concentrations of Methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 Carbon Monoxide Warnings e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time WARNING the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions i 1 il 5 h ll Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon haust gases from entering the vehicle monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill 5 Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the ADDING FUEL engine running for an extended period of time If the Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the of the vehicle If the gas
92. NDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 When you press the VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR button and say Help or Main Menu 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E Commands The Voice Recognition system und
93. NG CONTENTS W Starting Procedures ss ss ees 249 o Manual Transmission If Equipped 249 o Automatic Transmission If Equipped 249 ONormal Starting vo dcs eieebaoded HARE Re grat d 249 H Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or E none uu ARIE ee ee 250 HI Engine Fails To Start 12 22 2 si d ee es 250 Per lene oa bee cede AT OR OE 251 ll Manual Transaxle If Equipped D 5 Speed Manual Transaxle O Recommended Shift Speeds ELDOWESRIIDDE sake bee d door ego woes ed 209 Bl Automatic Transaxle If Equipped 253 o Brake Transmission Interlock System 254 o Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock Dyce PTT 209 E Gear Ranges a beh shows 45 ot eg ho KORES 255 246 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id N AutoStick If Equipped 257 D Anti Lock Brake System ABS If DOperaion eee 258 Equipped eese n 266 EIE E E EN NG 258 N Electronic Brake Control System 268 WE Driving On Slippery Surfaces vase vase ves 259 SEO EE EO dons a D Acceleration Ee 259 D Brake Assist System BAS 269 HTracion LES See 259 3 Traction Control System TCS 270 E Driving Through Water 0 260 Ed EE eae ie d 3 Flowing Rising Water 260 B Tire Safety Information 274 O Shallow Standing Water 260 Tie WATKINS PM Pm 274 M Power Steering esee 262 O Tire Identification Number TIN 278 O Power S
94. ON button and say 3 7 4 6 tt Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts o
95. OR e REOR 407 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Temperature Grades 2o aee tees xs 407 uat Grades cis o qe ET bite d iue 406 Ties Wear usc werde ROSE ka DERE SPR 407 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 401 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We st
96. OTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transaxle clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter NOTE Do not allo
97. Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable lamp status if equipped THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 lime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat Belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection Cruise control status Traction stability control status Tire pressure monitoring system status 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby United States and all Canadian provinces require that can become a missile inside the vehicle The force small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the required to hold even an infant on your lap could law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Children 12 yea
98. Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a handheld Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 163e5a8 Three Button RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to RKE Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both button
99. RNING Continued e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Continued WARNING Continued e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher SE r l I wil Ny wil F UE d ning i i j s a i N pu 1 rr uini jt N n 1 Li i AE EE MM i N T i i lh LI p n y ip ay H i 1 Ad a il 5 ey i R qe Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning CAUTION
100. S 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light 034206938 Power Sunroof Switch N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING Opening the Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open 3 condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious ni again injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being Express Mode thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You Press the switch rearward
101. S TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 81182c72 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended
102. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other Radio Frequency RF electronics will not cause inter ference with this system All of the Keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle una
103. TING NEE Id Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Euggage and from Tire Placard weighs Trailer Tongue Weight Oceupant 1 200 lbs EXAMPLE 1 Cou part 2 130 log 865lbs ET 195 Ibs Occupanl 2 D lbs Panipat 2 18 Ina GCocupart 3 130 ae TOTAL WEIGHT 541 lbs 940 lbs 329 Ibs Caralipant 200 lbs Groupanot 2 400 lbs TOTAL WEINSHT AGO las 565 Ibs 400 lbs 465 Ibs 41124014 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Underinflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire failure Overinflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and lems You could lose control of your vehicle satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve areas are affected by improper tire pressure hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle
104. Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 278 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Tire ldentification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tiresas
105. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start o
106. UNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to mm exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types Hog am be Display 16 Digit
107. Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric oun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft cloth FUSES Integrated Power Module IPM The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed on the
108. W BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 m ht eee SE EE ES EA Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions E E EE ee eed PEPE aa a a RE f TeMMMuveMYMMM Io Ti latch and buckle which allows INA t seat belt with a m the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when The second row center lap shoulder belt features a three poin the seat is folded The mini buckle and shoulder belt can ide trim panel ight s in ther then be stored out of the way for added conven 1ence its latch and regular latch from inl 1 Remove the m im panel side tr ight rear in the r stowed position Latch Stowage ini M 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the seat 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint zofr2s2s2200 seers See eet eee ae a ee ed veers nun LLL LLL LI een iii Routing the Rear Center Shoulder Belt 4 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the mini latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click 5 Sit back in seat Slide the regular latch plate up the Routing the Rear Center Shoulder Belt webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 6 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap b
109. WARNING equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder Brake System The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked In order to assure brake system performance all brake when performing under hood services or immediately if system components should be inspected periodically the brake system warning light is on Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked proper maintenance intervals 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed N
110. WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED the window and open the door with the outside door Power Window Switches handle 021906196 Power Window Switch Location The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows There are single window NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 controls on each passenger door trim panel which oper ate the passenger door windows The window controls under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit ter EVIC in Section 4 of this manual WARNINCG Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power WINDOW switches Such entrapment may result i
111. YOUR VEHICLE 353 WARNING To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be An i motion grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the where your exhaust system can contact anything that vehicle can burn e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires l disconnected f l d iod In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning See Ind a a pen engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe Cooling System and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturers specifica tions should be obtained immediately e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position Continued 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radia
112. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision injury A belt worn under the arm can cause a internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that ers your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together D retest ar oe or ee NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the belt to retract fully p be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across WARNING your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could eve
113. able on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary T
114. ade 5 gines 12 19 18 29 25 40 32 52 downshift early so that the engine will not be s overburdened Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED NOTE The Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT changes ratios in a continuous manner This may sometimes feel as if it is slipping but this is normal and does not harm anything 254 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE You MUSI press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Inter
115. ally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting pro cedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 WARNING MANUAL TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing WARNING serious personal injury 5 Speed Manual Transaxle You or others could be injured if you leave the CAUTION vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to especially on an incline 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera tor pedal
116. alted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month Special Care e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPARS cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped You can identify if your vehicle has Stain Repel Seat Fabric that makes spills easy to clean reduces odor from spills and reduces static by the presence of a tag on the side of the seat
117. anada ca for Cana dian residents 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REO RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode N UNDERSTAND
118. ance Procedures in Section 7 Key In lgnition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition the power door locks will not lock and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will not function SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that 16
119. and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid
120. and release and the sunroof could also be seriously injured or killed Always will open automatically from any position The sunroof fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all will open fully and stop automatically this is called passengers are properly secured too Express Open During Express Open operation any Do not allow small children to operate the sun movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Closing the Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial close condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again To ensure sunroof is fully closed press and hold switch until sunroof has completely stopped moving Express Mode Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically this is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will a
121. and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set
122. anel Lens Cleaning 367 N INDEX 417 Integrated Power Module Fuses 368 Intenor Appearance Care iis a AA hd ies 365 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 132 nee eine a os AA AS OROS OE EE TOE ee ees E Jack Location 2043 4 9 r4 SERE PER 326 Jack CODORIIOD 25 202 9999 BAR daret eee 326 327 Jacking InstbuctoDl usos vos dos petes doe 327 Jump SPAN 2 dew ha uos d eae oe AE ae oie 331 Key Programming auk x done eo DRR ER Pk Cd edo eno d 17 Key Hepli mel suis SE E E 16 Key Sentry Intimobilizer is sace ticmettee im 15 Ke CI BOISE a3 uon vues viris eerta veg y gs 15 Keyless Entry System Sedan 20 ME EE TEE EE EEEE ene E 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 373 Lap Sh ulder Belts 2 44204 4o ehe d oy 99 of Latches MEES EE ET ee eae ee een TES 74 HOOd E E E E estes 124 Lead Free Gasoline SS rsen 301 Leaks Fluid amp 4345 2e eim ee iag ranima 74 Life of Wires 23343 R ie VERE de TAXE ch 289 Liliedie ed Hy Sawa tadeh SR oe ese bod TES 34 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 158 Eight BUDS Lacs esee qo Pria d dor dr HELEN 74 371 lei Gee one ee Suen te bak eee ec eee 74 126 ide ETC a oa oe 59 73 171 TCI sisie EER AR ORE ES DEER OU EO 171 Anti Lock 2a caer Eie RUE BRA EE RE eee BackUp C Drake VORMS us Vds eq d abra DR a a gend Bulb Replacement casco edo EER Re AE awe x COCO OO S Center Mounted SOP a iss ye S Dimmer Switch Headli
123. anguage effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set thes
124. ar No Fuse Re Control Smart Glass quired If Equipped 20 Amp Heated Seat If id Mad 25 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater Yellow Equipped Natural If Equipped C 23 24 29 26 27 28 29 0 N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 CAUTION e When installing the IPM cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the IPM and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Front Header Light sasie Rm moo n ed T578 Center Dome BIO DE see es dre E Og tor ete T578 Rear Cargo Hasblight sug ac gra oe t es 8 AJSLF 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 2 2 2 ny
125. ase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can
126. ash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4
127. ast 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended e It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the uconnect phonebook e Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End A
128. ater can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Always check the depth of the standing water e Driving through standing water may cause dam before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Lim
129. ath away from the HomeLink button you wish to program It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code oystem 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light sta
130. bag which may cause severe or front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap fatal injury to the infant portion actly when installing an infant or child restraint Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child NOTE For additional information refer to restraint www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be switched to an automatic locking mode which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and
131. battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels Bicb4d4fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 3 ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage sistance when programming Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter cause serious injury or de
132. beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Headlights Parking Lights and Instrument Panel Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn the multifunction lever to the second detent for headlight operation N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 GEE ARE Te M SEE ARE Te SS PEPE E WERE He Re Se Re RR RD N WERE He Re Se Li NAMNSNNENNN NNI TUS NAMNNMMNXNANN TN Rae OPO IE oe Re N Aa ME ed Lev EER RE RS ER a Maur Urna nri Ie ILU Ive ee ee ee ee ee M EE zt EE zt EH EE EE EE EH EE M Pb M PE M as z E z EE Ive je I Headlight Control Dimmer Control To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights Lights on Reminder rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or Ifthe headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition down is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Fog Lights If Equipped NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will lever To activate the front fog lights tum on the turn off the fog lights parking lights or the low beam
133. cap is lost or damaged be sure vehicle the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 306 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id After removing the eas cap place the eas cap tether cable over a hook Ss the inside ae fuel door This keeps the a gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc surface tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled eel kke SNM SEER oe eee Never add fuel when the engine is running This is Fuel Eiller Door in violation of most state and Federal fire regula tions and will cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on EE ae E ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehic
134. ch as benzene thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System The Manual Heating and Air Conditioning system allows you to balance the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Mode Control Air Direction The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution as identified by the symbols dus x vari oS Bi
135. channels 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time N UNDERSTANDIN
136. ck is activated the manual ratio selected is displayed in the transmission ratio display and tipping the shift lever to the or direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio Autostick is deactivated e By holding the shift lever to momentarily e When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE e When in 6th position touching the shift lever to the right e When heavy Anti Lock Brake System ABS applica tion is detected General Information e If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the 1st gear ratio e If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio e If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine However the CVT will stay in the manually selected ratio ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the e If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off e If the system detects a problem it will disable the Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Ra
137. conomy use these modes only when necessary Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned ON or OFF to control air flow N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen gers the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward the left rear passenger Fan Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control from the left OFF to the right position a xi 81cab395 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the fan control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control a m Use this control to regulate the PELLE temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area E indicates warmer temperatures mm amp icaadas1 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce a
138. control Continued 284 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued e Unegual tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Underinflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated ee STARTING AN
139. cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over when safe and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the H turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Maintenance Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING 6 During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may become too hot If this happens the transmission overheat in B dicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle cools down enough to allow a return to the 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M requested speed If the high speed is maintained the WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or WARNING slippery areas e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you
140. d 81826hd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value 300 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio freguencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flas
141. d is displayed NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen raad 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Changing the Time Zone Er EE SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO l l WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right clock setting menu will a
142. d life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING e Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica tors the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall
143. ded CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h 292 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Ed C ES ce O55707139 Tire Rotation Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired
144. dered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If nec
145. dex at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 010806190 N INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS um Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS I Word About Your Keys iis se ee mes 12 BIenton Key Removal ai io se repr ath 12 O Locking Doors With The Key 15 O Key In Ignition Reminder 15 Noni Key EIE IE ET P Ress 15 A Replacement BUB ex stems wA S EAS 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 E General Infor
146. display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any pro
147. e airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags If Equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The ORC module determines if a side collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate The side airbag control module will not detect roll over front or rear collisions The ORC module monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position These include all of the items previously mentioned In moderate to severe side collisions the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas The side curtain airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side curtain airbags do not install a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks or similarly mounted A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the bags e When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a colision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker it signa
148. e catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 17 Cruise Indicator If Eguipped cruise Tris indicator shows that the Speed Control system is ON 18 TriplOdometer Display Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles 0 km The odometer must be in Trip mode to reset 19 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked b
149. e defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations D
150. e event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con trol module see Driver and Front Passenger Supplemen tal Restraint System SRS Airbag Section Like the NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
151. e lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn off Washer Control N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 CAUTION Mist Feature Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the allow the wipers to return to the park position before wipers will continue to operate turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to dd the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted HER 810dB8d45 Mist Control 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the steering column push down on the lever below WORDING the multifunction lever With one hand firmly on the Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is wheel move the steering column up or down as desired moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have QUA an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged Electronic Sp
152. e majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 MPEG Sampling Freguency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button w
153. e noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h 268 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock mode e the ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains sophis ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This in terference can cause possible loss of Anti Lock brak ing capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assis
154. e your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Lights Fluid Leaks Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel while you work the controls Check turn signal and high engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline beam indicator lights on the instrument panel fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or D brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be oor Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Koli e 6 3 Ge ee EE RR ET TE ERES 79 WMiuconnect phone If Equipped DIuside Day Night NAIOP io se RY rtm a
155. ed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or 4 more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function di TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For uconnect Voice Recognition Sys
156. ed operation If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm the horn will sound for 30 seconds and flash the lights for 60 sec onds If the triggering device is not deactivated the horn will sound again after a five second delay for another 30 seconds If the trigger remains present this cycle will repeat for up to five minutes N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Set The Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm After approximately 16 seconds the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed To Disarm The System Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the
157. eed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel EH prr Bi ix M I M It M I m Perd I f Tilt Steering Control N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 BMHhodcar Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control switch ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the 3 instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the Electronic Speed Control lever and release Release the accelerato
158. efer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with 9 404 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National High
159. eft to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following TEI format types Program Type Dips Program Type 16 Digit Character 5 yP Display No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues defined 7 poe no Religious Talk Rel Talk 3 Countr Countr News News 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio wi
160. elt if it is too tight plate into the buckle until you hear a click pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding eat SESS Sees imum EE under the belt in a collision L L L L L L L L ke NN dd N nonu pt RIPE Pe Re peram EEEE a aot oi aian Horas aa IM M LL ELLE Sees RR es ee ne xx PES E ORE RR RR Connecting Mini Latch to Buckle uu 8178e9Sb 7 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up 8 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 9 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle Wette seer ri Terr lt ESI Ma Ma Pale Ba Be Ma US MR RA EE ER iid 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for storage insert the regular latch plate into the black button on the top of the mini buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in th
161. em is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the
162. em performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not their gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States 304 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended
163. emos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands Language German Language Dutch Language Italian Language English Language French Language Spanish Tutorial Voice Training NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recogni tion 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Front Seat Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of
164. ents of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Oil Filter P N 04884900AD or equivalent Spark Plugs ZFR5F 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transaxle CVT MOPAR CVTF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transaxle MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 or ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS N Emissions Control System Maintenance 382 O Required Maintenance Intervals W Maintenance Schedule uuu serm mega 382 M A N T z N A N C E S C H 3 D U L 3 S 8 M A l N T 3 N A N C E S C H 3 D U L E S 8 382 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for ve
165. er This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads names text e When prompted recite the phone number for the names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook entry that you are adding phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect After you are finished adding an entry into the phone website for supported phones book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the e To call a name from downloaded or uconnect main menu Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the uconnect phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cel
166. er seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to the Section on Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against WARNING Continued the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space WARNING Continued between you and the door e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more The front airbag system consists of the following back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has side airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat with your seat belt to restrain you properly
167. era tool sepie eens oe bane Dk 160 Body Mechanism Lubrication 350 Dille Location ies KERE Chobe ed eas ooo 279 Brake Assist SYSTE uuu ER seg AR der tow kari 269 Drake lid os sies san EE DEERE ER AE UE 379 Brake Dankie osse wu y aes tA DELER PESCA 264 PG y a2 uad aer DR RE EE x 265 359 Pit Loc CDS cres eoi EED REK ees ue 266 269 Male E UII 2445 maw coe 2 Ve EE EER D n 959 lcs A had 3 Cha eee eee Yee Ge 264 Wain LENE eoeae demum wx qu eee oe 178 Bikes 2 932 395 5392 54 5 9 9 2 Sc EAS 265 359 Brake Transmission Interlock 254 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 70 Bulb Replacement so ss ia dne os 371 372 BUMS Lig ARE OE TE eirt EAST 74 371 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 3 7 Capacities Fluid sers awe 9 99 4 UR ER ews ieii 3 7 Caps Filler PUCL EEE EEEE EET 305 Oil Eeue ui se DRAAD ER REEN RR 340 346 Power ClCCHING 2 4 os eer EER KORE RR RU EES 263 Cdi Washes cord a aka Se be d MO RR PR don 363 Carbon Monoxide Warning 72 305 OER C OVEP faye ae 19 FEE VR EE 155 Carco Arca LOqUUEGS soaa exo RR N e EE DA 154 Cargo Compartment EER EO ELE HER pak eae eee 4 154 COR OJDI 2 tae een bene WOES ed ER HOE 154 Caro lead HOOF sess uade pr RE RC ER a 156 TEM 412 INDEX NEE Id Caeo le DONE se cesa egies d EE BEER meee 157 Cellular Phone leen 83 236 Center High Mounted Stop Light 376 Chains Jie tas cena ee heee ee shee ose Bees 291 Cha
168. erstands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to
169. ert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M statio
170. es When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elaps
171. es to Low level heating and turns one indicator light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation It will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation If Low level heating is selected the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light off after 30 min utes of continuous operation Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M dd dd dd ne eke eee LER LR I RADAR eter Re SN Re Ao Ry Fa Ma En Se Aa He NEN SEER the full upward position and push the seatback forward To fold the front passenger seat lift the recliner handle to until it rests on the seat cu
172. esert operation or more than 5046 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T 3 N A N C E S C H 3 D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 389 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or Schedule 66 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate tires I Change the engine oil and engine oil Replace the engine air cleaner filter filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Rotate tires Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs except 2 4L PZEV Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km O C C O L L L L L M A l N T z N A N C E S C H 3 D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 72 000 Mile
173. essary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type 264 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE PARKING BRAKE NOTE The parking brake lever will not release unless When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position the Brake Light in the instrument cluster will come on F NNUUUUNSBBBHUUUNM Ht HERE MEEEEEEEPPDERE III 0000004 NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is on It does not show the degree of brake application If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving a chime will sound to alert the driver The chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has returned to a stop WEER ER en SR AR Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is set To set the parking brake pull up firmly on E the lever Also place the shift lever in the PARK position Muret automatic transaxle or REVERSE position manual transaxle To release the parking brake apply the brake pedal pull up slightly on the lever then depress the button on the end of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the floor Parking Brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the automatic transaxle locking mec
174. evel to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use
175. f track 1 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 RW FF P
176. ff will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under thi
177. for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections
178. g on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 NOTE e For the following example the combined weight of e The following table shows examples on how to calcu occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities 392 kg of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle 282 STARTING AND OPERA
179. ght mS Id Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator AE AA AA AA EE OO 271 273 Engine Temperature Warning 2e 172 lC HU MRERERERERISTATTARTOSTILOII SIT 74 POO ET HOE EE TE G3 a eS 4 128 177 372 Hegde Nt Wild os as ve eS IEEE PS ES 126 liede ds T 126 High Beam Maicato 3s sco aor bean BE Re PR 178 Instrument Cluster sess 126 Fu Tr 375 Lichts On Reminder asses PAR erria oet 127 LOW Piel ss bede 405 eee ewe oe RSS NUS 170 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 175 Map DAOINO ereed sarr vds x E esp ease wu 130 Oil Pressure ee ees 171 Seat Belt Reminder sis ice ace cioe yo y s 171 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 1 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 175 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 171 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 172 Traction Control 4 252 9e RR RO reed 271 TEE TIR Aes a eee a 74 126 128 373 NOISE 2o 2292 bee TEE ELE TIR 170 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 169 boadmes Venice sae GERS REL BOORD DR 307 309 Capaci 550k hone 9 eb See ae eH e OE OE 309 Ties 202008 ea E P NUES 279 Locks Child Protection 29 3 wars dv mE oa 31 Door serere opens eed eee eee ee ES RSS 26 Power Door ea zac hex 24440488 bow RE ERS 27 L brication BOER soe ok e Sek NKR HE AR dens 350 Lriibat Sap DOE see pru e 979 8 oa a 6 9 wow a os 119 Maintenance Free Dalery ri apia EE RE aaa 348 Maintenance General 000005 344 Maintena
180. ght CUP HOIUCTS 1 1 paana acd oe Shh ee ee ee 152 Customer Assistance eee 401 Data Recorder Event 0 000 00 59 Dealer Service cote ge HOR EES ER RS OS 343 Defroster Rear Window 159 Defroster Windshield 73 238 Delay Intermittent Wipers 2 ea e 132 Diagnostic System Onboard 341 Dimmer Switch Headlight esce dee aos 129 Dipsticks Lower eetiie 2 uoa urgere es vare edv 263 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant a xus x nome emi 357 Eueine RE EE ER 346 boor Locks cuatro e ES ES oi SR d 26 Door Locks Automatic een 28 Door Opener Ganse vies edo sari xu PR an aes 138 Bio Ee AR AE bead eee Gey tes 6 253 Driver s Seat Back Db sier N e e 0s 119 Driving On Slippery Surfaces iese aa ee DR DRR Ee WE 259 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Diandine Walel ss eet dob PEER RE mend 260 Electric Remote Mirrors suce uocem dr ESE os 81 Bl cirical Power Ouuels iie oe dex SE EE hs 148 Electronic Brake Control System asses esame 268 Anti Lock Brake System iaces 444 cem ed 269 Brake Assist System nc sores om Re Rees 269 Electronic Stability Program 270 Traction Control System Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP 270 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 180 Se Id Emergency In Case of Es ER OR EE N EEN 326 UO ren sod cea ered Coens E
181. gine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs except 2 4L PZEV Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Y Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T z N A N C 3 S C H 3 D U L 3 S 0 392 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Ed 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule d H Rotate tires I Change the engine oil and engine oil _J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary _ Flush and replace the engine coolant Replace the air conditioning filter _I Replace the spark plugs 2 4L PZEV Inspect the CV joints H Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect exhaust system not done at 60 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your d
182. go area have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan Continued 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles eguipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way and may be damaged Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done im properly so follow this procedure carefully Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured NOTE Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in the ON position will cause vehicles with an automatic transaxle CVT2 to go into default mode and turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL See your autho rized dealer to correct this condition
183. h on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States lt e uan don E Wie E px AERE S KR5S120123 ande uuum 5x50 2353 1 2 1w 52 3 2671 9120123 STARTING AND OPERATING 301 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel economy when using high quality regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of Boodrat 87 The use of premium gasoline is not
184. h receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s direc tions it provides for a more level ride offering more 312 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id consistent steering and brake control and thereby en hancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds contributing positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recom mended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with GAWR requirements Installing A Trailer Hitch NOTE If you install a trailer hitch after you purchase the
185. hable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 tor Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 45
186. hanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill grade You should always apply the parking brake before leav ing the vehicle WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency 266 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE If either of the two h
187. he terminal posts and free of corrosion Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 CAUTION Continued e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for further warranty information the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pr
188. he driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately If A Deployment Occurs The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the airbag control modules detect a moderate to severe col lision They help restrain the driver and front passenger and then they immediately deflate 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like Enhanced Accident Response System particles The particles are a normal by product of the In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag with the vehicle stopped the vehicle communication inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin network intact and the power intact the Enhanced eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation Accident Response System performs the following func rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat tions irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc e Flashes the hazard lights
189. hese comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts 406 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the Natio
190. hicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires M A l N T 3 N A N C E S C H 3 D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 388 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or Schedule 54 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule d H Rotate tires l Change the engine oil and engine oil _J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road d
191. hicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 383 oil if it has been six months since your last oil change and even if the oil change ind
192. icator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T 3 N A N C E S C H 3 D U L E S 8 M A N T 3 N A N C E S C H 3 D U L E S 8 384 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M Once a Month e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power s
193. icle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e f you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver s door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Info
194. igh speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting se
195. ill bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in seguence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down N UNDERST
196. ime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmissions or vehicle is in motion manual transmissions Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Gate Ajar with a single chime e Headlights On e Key In Ignition e Check TPM System e Oil Change Required Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 5 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch
197. in posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 286 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id loading may be reguired for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original eguipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in the case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 vehicle only Since this tire has limited trea
198. ine cooling system is operating satisfactorily UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool ing System Pressure Cap paragraph 4 Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph kph 5 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 6 Low Fuel Light
199. into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size EE 5 CEANTNTY n cua Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions er ii 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and ds ee puBITBe3BE adjust the seat Pulling Out the Latch Plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click WARNING EE ESEE d E Ed NM A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the od pii tai DEEP Mr iran a E n Ra RD Ed ore PII i Nor C n LI LL LI LIO OnLLn LAALCCOTD Llilllrl I illii iet buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued DD ie 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under id oie A danger on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight ous
200. io frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems AN j es ar Chirysler 4tC 812260939 2 e E AF
201. ir flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Circulation Control Use this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A light will illuminate when you are in recirculate mode Only use the ps recirculate mode to temporarily rs block out any outside odors Steaads2 smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE Continuous use of the recirculate mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes Air Conditioning Normal Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illumi nate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Bicaads NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Air n OE MAX A C For maximum cooling select the air direction to either the Panel or Bi Level position using the mode control Press the A C button and the recirculation button so that both lights are illuminated and se
202. ir pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers EE EE ee TS pop n n RR ee ee es 0 EES 0 E i i ee ee ee ee eed se ese see O226070TO Airbag and Knee Bolster Location 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 3 Knee Bolster 4 Knee Bolster NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation m Je ke menn RR RR EE disi is that are based on collision severity perdue 1 ex P IN This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain amp X UN E
203. itch 129 O Adjustable Head Restraints 120 OFlash To Pass 2 eee eee eee ee 130 o Heated Seats If Equipped 120 5 Map Reading Lights 0 00 130 o Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 122 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 oO Daytime Running Lights DRL If Ete ii sec PEE RE PER DROS NOR EIER 131 M Windshield Wipers And Washers 131 o Windshield Wiper Operation 131 El Intermittent Wiper Systemi coes ese dk 132 BO Windshield Washers 132 OMist Peah ass yun Ee eee WE Ra E SERS 133 B Tilt Steering Column EES Se 134 N Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 134 El IG ER AG Roe EO eq im Gay den x hae pr eres 195 E To Set At A Desired Speed ss deken ae 9a os 136 El lo Deachvate s xci obra ER READ AD 3 REN 136 OTe Restine Speed vaas bor ERE EDE S P ES 136 o To Vary The Speed Setting O Manual Transaxle o To Accelerate For Passing ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped O Programming HomeLink H Gate Operator Canadian Programming D Using HomeLink O Reprogramming A Single HomeLink button O Security O Troubleshooting Tips sss acp b aede eat O General Information ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M O Opening The Sunroof sess eaaa aa a 145 HE losine The Sunroof siese oo Oe ER RR 146 O Pinch Protect Feature siek SERE EPO
204. ited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 262 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are consi
205. itoring System IPMS under Starting and Operating in Section 5 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Set tings is displayed in the EVIC Use the EVIC button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects English Espanol or Francais depending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language NOTE uconnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection under uconnect phone If Equipped in Section 3 Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH 24 km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL position auto matic t
206. iven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Continued 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M UPHOLDERS Your vehicle is eguipped with four cupholders There are two cupholders located in the front ee EA E EE AO E PODES nm 5105595 Front Cupholders ree There are two cupholders behind the center console for rear passengers RR He Ee on E eet EER EE EE Se ener t 5105599 HG eed Rear Cupholders CONSOLE FEATURES The floor console s sliding armrest moves forward 3 in 76 2 mm to accommodate shorter drivers The armrest lid also includes a unigue flip pocket for storing a phone or an MP3 player The bin inside the console can hold up to 10 CD jewel cases or other items securely out of sight Floor Console Flip Pocket UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING Do n
207. izer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se guence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol or ESP turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and 1st gear Usually the least accelerator pedal ao pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast ning the wheels is most effective may lead to transaxle overheating and failure It can WARNING also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continu ously for more than 30 seconds Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE than 30 mph 48 km h
208. ject Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror i ee X RIEL DEE ee Power Mirror Control 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left WARNING or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the convex mirror will look smaller and farther away center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror arenes Mirror Directions NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the vanity mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward SS SS en vn he omom m mn on ee ee pa da EE at at at eta tata RR RR ER TR Tn n a n he he hehe ene eek ee ae eee SS sss RAT Pony in Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Sliding Feature The sun visors may be extended out to provide more coverage of the side glass uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated uconnect phone Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for uconnec
209. justers on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seat back Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 TEER Rear Seat Tether Anchors Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check the belt fit periodically A child s squirming or sl
210. k the trailer can occur that may be difficult for the driver to wheels control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e GCWR must not be exceeded e Total weight must be distributed between the tow e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over vehicle and the trailer such that the following four load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a ratings are not exceeded loss of control poor performance or damage to the brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen 1 GVWR sion chassis structure or tires 2 GTW e Safety chains must always be used between your 3 GAWR vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized this requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer
211. layer and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate RES RSC Radio 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to tum on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press
212. ld have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 27 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Button If Equipped Pushing this button will switch between the different EVIC functions Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this section for more information 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 28 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display If Eguipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this sec
213. le diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II in Section 7 of this manual for more information CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar 308 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door B Pillar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
214. le locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off imme diately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot
215. le the vehicle is in motion Apply The following indicators should be used to ensure that the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position Always apply the parking brake first and then place the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops WARNING e Look at the shift indicator window on the shifter bezel i w to ensure it is in the PARK position Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure P those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles e You must depress the brake pedal to move the shift you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is lever out of the PARK position running Before exiting a vehicle you should always caution CAUTION shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise dam age to the steering column or shift lever could result You must also depress the brake pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 REVERSE Shift into this range only after the vehicle has
216. leaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment right rear side and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not engine coolant antifreeze WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent
217. lectronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage it until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put the trans mission in NEUTRAL and increase the engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Recreational Manual Trans Automatic Towing Condi axle Vehicles Transaxle Ve tion hicles Four Wheel Flat Bl Tow All Wheels on P Two Wheel Never ndi Dolly Tow Front or Rear Wheels on Ground Flat Bed Tow All Wheels on Bed of Truck STARTING AND OPERATING 321 NOTE Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may be recreationally towed flat towed at any legal highway speed for any distance if the manual transaxle is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position CAUTION e DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a automatic transaxle Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all f
218. linder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Manual Transmission 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 2 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 3 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the right To unlock the door turn the key to the left Refer to Body Lubrication under Mainten
219. ll LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint Sys tem for typical installation instructions iius i m am ETE DEPPEDE EE T imm p n T EE su RE Se al te a a Haan hd TB TREER N S RNEER N Ed cnt ee atte a Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have te
220. ll be tuned to the next freguency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM N
221. lled A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap I the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal reguirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Ins
222. llular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the pr
223. lock System This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transaxle will not shift out of PARK Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a remov able plug in the right side of the shifter housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system If this occurs obtain service as soon as possible Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON position and the brake pedal is depressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range La Sod E 051006184 Shift Lever PARK This supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range 256 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Never use PARK whi
224. ls Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care sho
225. ls the inflator unit A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflat able Knee Blocker The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker inflates rearward toward the driver s knees to help protect the knees and position the driver for the best interaction with the front airbag The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink your eyes It then quickly deflates while helping to protect the driver s knees e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING need airbag protection will not activate the system This Unapproved modifications or service procedures to does not mean something is wrong with the airbag the front passenger seat assembly its related compo system nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra dent A modified vehicle may not comply with re quired Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FM VSS sions and or skin reddening to t
226. lu lar phone is accessible Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructio
227. ly multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN freguencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 ie ls 24 22 05 16 y 56 48 Sampling pit Rate kbps ito Frequency kHz P MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 48 64 96 128 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Fil
228. m with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You cou
229. mable Features menu N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Compass Variance is highlighted The Compass Variance message and the current vari ance zone number will be displayed To change the zone press and hold longer than two seconds the EVIC button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary with individual long for at least one second EVIC button presses for each increment until the desired variance is achieved To exit the Variance Programming press the EVIC button with a short less than one second button press NOTE The factory default Zone is 8 During program ming the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Using a quick button press less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until the EVIC displays the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu 3 Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Calibrate Compass Yes is displayed 4 Using a long button press more tha
230. mation si sies rw OE DERE ES 18 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 18 H To set The Security ATQNE 4 224 ac tee 19 OTO Disarm Ihe System uu sued ame x 3 green 19 o Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override 19 ll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 20 o To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 21 O Remote Key Unlock Driver Door Al First loc T T 21 O Illuminated Approach If Equipped 22 H To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id O Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 22 AAMO DOWN oa oe oot uta ea he eee eee RR 33 O Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock 23 o Window Lockout Switch 34 o Using The Panic Alarm ssh ext ER CNEM ii MEE EE C SR EE OE 34 O Programming Additional RKE Transmitters 25 W Occupant Restraints 36 E General Intormnauon 3444 eer Ses 25 O Lap Should r Belts serere x4 due 96h Rhen 37 O RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 42 INO Fol sie KAREN RR IER OE DE AR 26 O Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt HD ESI LL N EN 26 Operating Instructions s isss a ay er sses 43 ei Pawar a OE S NN 27 Hear belt Pretensioners ase dne XR MEE 46 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear de EE mde SIS Doors If Equipped 0000 31 BeltAlert llle 47 ll Power Windows If Equipped
231. mitter 5 3 9 ga a sue bebe 138 Unleaded Gasoline nu saora raea OR ee deu ded DU En 301 Nail ioi MP 83 Vehicle Certification Label 12228 o Rr 9s 308 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Velde Loading ace d frate cud eu es 279 307 309 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle SOLE egr ceESE S PRG PPLeMIT TI US 371 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Voice Recognition System VR ls 112 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 169 Warnings and Ca tions vaas WER Rd HD de 6 Warranty INfOrmauion so esa sey ESE RR E ARE 404 Vis lei demo EDO suas eed adoret uites ger e t Washers Windshield leen 132 Wachine VORE ou bone hee mow dete dtd Dofus Red 363 Water Drive THOUS au ies eise ME ven ce os 260 Wheel and Wheel Trim sss 364 TEM 426 INDEX NEE Id Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 364 dne Dialielig sie ont sn 99 45 4 EORR OR d ted 147 Window Airbag Side Curtain 50 Window Fogging xa e T oy d X pj oq een 243 ele AO AO EE OX REST PRESE IE 32 OWE ARE ON ER eee AN N IE NE EG 32 Windshield Defroster SS SS VA Windshield Washers 131 132 Windshield Wipers eds 6426604046 131 350 Wipers IntermHeDt 2404265 aves bec e Hees 132 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EOUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to rad
232. mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for high MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 279 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle Tire and Loading Information Placard 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare
233. mpt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be
234. ms and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have been shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission syst
235. n The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malf
236. n Section 6 for more information 13 Shift Lever Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission shift lever selection 14 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the l
237. n and Tem perature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S Tires designed to this standard have the letter T design standards The size designation for L I Metric molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the tion Example T145 80D18 103M letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT spares designed for temporary emergency use only 276 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T
238. n cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it down to make sure that it is locked in position NN THINGS TO KNO
239. n one second press the EVIC button this will place the Compass in 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M calibration mode The CAL indicator will come on con tinuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the com pass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate 5 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A short EVIC button press from the Calibrate Compass Yes screen will exit the EVIC Customer Programmable Features and return it to its normal operating mode SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate made ar a pee on A OG ME3 WAR A PUGH AUDI SELECT 042005200 REO Radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction
240. n serious injury or death Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCKOUT switch To enable the window con trols press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time 021906197 Window Lockout Switch LIFTGATE NOTE The Key that is used to start your vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn it to the right manual lock models only The liftgate can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the key To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 HohrdUhlne EE s e Although the liftga
241. nal Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 407 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire
242. name language Number specific phonebonk will he ic Dialect used The phones paired are available across all languages with entry is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 41 cBbF b 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Entries Listed one at a time Current Number Phorabook New Entry Added teal Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Ficht Voice Tree Setup UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Confirmation T Towing Toggle List Phones Confirmatian Prompts on off Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing pin code Phones Select phone List Phones New phone will temporarily Select a language English Espanol or Francais override phone priorities to be deleted oyslern eyslem Lisls Phone Deleted Gon Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030505540 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primar Alternate s Primar Alternate s Zero call one two three cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download our ive 1X eight nine star olus pound add location all emergenc English erase all Espanol Francais help home seven eit ON N UNDERSTANDING THE F
243. nce Procedures sen 344 Maintenance Schedule 382 N INDEX 419 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 175 342 Manual Service OE debui oo Shoe ewe Eats 405 Manual Transaxle 249 251 362 PONOSU acus Si BIER cade ents ys SP 293 Fluid Level Check ess 362 Frequency of Fluid Change sagaci mb 362 Lubricant Selection 0000 362 Map Reading Lights ss aor peter i ET 130 Master Cylinder Brakes liess 359 hinnalt E E E E EEEE EEE E 79 Automate DIMMING seres er ees Ea o eei s 80 Electric Powered ist ema SUR ene oe 81 Outside AA AA Rew ec OE ER ORS 80 KearvieW AE NEE ETE TE N FEE IN 79 VOI 2d esca ded Ee Rer soe BOR HE RA ER ME Rus 83 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System id os ke a 293 IIODOE aE ead eres v Awe eet ae ND ae 343 404 Multi Function Control Lever 126 New Vehicle Break In Period 70 Occupant Restraints Sedan 36 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel iss et ERROR 301 Odometer 5 a5 ook be LA ORE OE ARE 174 jl Drm 174 176 Oil Change Indicator ied eee dene 174 OX Ense issie RR SUA SHE RUP cage 344 377 Scc ARE EET OO OR EK 377 Chance lied dues utes cam AREA EE eee 345 CHECKING sasie emeei eon ede hseh te ee es 344 DispOsal iese EE hae oun Genesee cane 346 Fier se bed hae e ee eee eee tae eee 347 leen ties om Ee vea x v ger wrap drhta EE 346 Mate
244. ng System GPS based Navigation system 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Refer to your uconnect tunes REN or RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure uconnect gps RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed Io move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downwar
245. ng of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steering or under steering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steer or under steer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP Indicator Light The ESP Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active If the ESP Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING e Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions Continued WARNING Continued e ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in tur
246. nging A Flat Tre uie E xe OS 326 Clan Ae INS ace edes RET Se IE EDE eee es 276 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 175 342 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 71 CHECKS die Guida eee in Gees SIUS HER 71 Child Restraint 23b 6v oe Kh oe EDE 62 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 66 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 65 Child Seley LOCKS ou osse Park eg vues 9g Gos 31 lede 4 244 ER ES EER UE SOR 68 Clean Air Gasoline aie uw x soe rey Fe 302 Cleaning Wheels N dte 6 AR SE EE 364 Climate Control 2 EP OR bee eee eee 236 Clock uuu oes a 645 4 oS oe OGG ER Ss 192 206 209 219 CoC veers ha ORR ORE EE OLIE 959 Clutch Fluid co ew ek DRR MR dried es 359 Coin Holder Ee ueeETIERRLDPLOEE RIT 152 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 235 Compact pare INE serioses Guess eee ees 286 CODSOIG xu eee dae TUE ee DERE AR EN PURUS 152 Contract Service coc duc eve HER Rede ach o UE Oe 403 Coolant Antifreeze leen 377 378 Cooler Deveiade ou sau x pda A RA DOE a Pop a 160 DOS DUSIBI acie sepa Purcell doro 959 Adding Coolant Antifreeze Ln 355 Coolant Level eese 354 357 Disposal of Used Coolant is docu dew 357 Drain Flush and Refill 354 HE DEEG E rn 957 Points to Remember 356 358 Pessi Cap soas qe acides DR UE RC 356 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze N INDEX 413 Corrosion Protection Cruise Li
247. ns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 272 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE ESP Operating Modes The ESP system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ee STARTIN
248. ns on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be 3 deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Dele
249. nt at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 5 WARNING 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death 290 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires eguiva lent to the originals in size guality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure
250. o into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most like
251. o the desired position and release the handle B Peeters eae 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an position JAAR ER AAS TrsTsTID 7 es ia os Se fesse BU RR By Hy Be Ee BL AR AR p T EE eet Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seat 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME a Eed Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in mms arr a a nooo EE EE oi i12 o repe the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down PRU m ems ON on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as dcus Ne Ri E Dou E OE practical To raise the head restraint pull up on the head E ii Y d BI p restraint To lower the head restraint press the button NIN c NN and push down on the head restraint e io Uu EE breker id Seas asses AS PS EEN Head Restraint Adjustment Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off uj If High level heating is selected the system automatically switch
252. oading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle 310 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plu
253. of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER INVERTER IF EGUIPPED EE Ee ee A 115 Volt 150 Watt AC power inverter is located on the me rear of the center console for added convenience This DNE Ou o um outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other i low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools Due to built in overload protection the power outlet will shut down if the power rating is exceeded Each device to be powered should be checked first to i i dide j make sure it does not exceed the outlet s 150 Watts E e Eo maximum rating i AG cee Se Re ER Sue ETER MORE RE EE EE ER AE ER Sd ne n n un mm K N RR eta eor rrr MUUTTU ee ed dd de 115 Volt Power Outlet N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 WARNING CAUTION Continued e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more guickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be dr
254. ompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at le
255. one Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 refer to Ioggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating
256. or MP3 WMA Play O Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play ll AM FM CD DVD Radio RER REN If sje unie pede C 55 O Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped 2422225 O Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped O Clock Setting Procedure 198 Bl Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MPS AUX Jack lt ove de se n H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 G Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 228 D Operating Instructions Video 1 TM Bl uconnect studios Satellite Radio If re iem UNES 234 Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Radios MR EE ee ON M 229 W Remote Sound System Controls E sien AGO ON ua d 39 ER ESE RE ER et 229 a EE OE O Electronic Serial Number Sirius ane oe Identification Number ESN SID 230 RED PO OE 322253 RES AS IR o dE CR O Selecting uconnect studios Satellite B CD DVD Maintenance 235 DINE ia EE ad ll Radio Operation
257. ory ERES Bulb Number Low Beam High Beam Headlight H13 LIGHTS BULBS Exterior Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Light ss eom bos OLI7AK Or 3ID7A Prone Pog LIGBE ss woos 9 Ec AU ERK terere ie J4 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL Rear Turn Tail Stop Backup Light License Light 3 Pull bulb off connector BULB REPLACEMENT ignal Front Turn Si ing hts Front Park Ig Headl d dealer for replacement See your authorize ights 1 Access Fog L tout la cu ight through the lower fasc 2 Rotate bulb and connector 1 4 turn counterclockwise N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 2 Grasp the tail light and pull firmly to disengage the light from the aperture panel Tail Lights Rear Turn Signals and Backup Lights 1 Remove the two push pins from the tail light housing I ZG SS IU SS BR Be Re RR DOO BERE 3330303002 m TRA TREER REELE EE READ RR RE AR RR N EE dm EED BR REDE NE ROES EANA ERA DRR RR AR DR RR EE RR EE EP RR EER R RE EE EANAN EE PR PR RR DE RE RE E PE Pred ve EREE T a ah h hi Torre fMMM TER ER EER RE Tre fs Tee EET sess DI es See ee LEED 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN 3 Twist and remove socket from light 4 N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 License Lights 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate UTE
258. osition To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 16 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of Cw an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the MIL flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or sever
259. ot operate this vehicle with the console compart ment lid in the open position Cell phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury NOTE The flip pocket and console lid features are intended to be used in the upright or open position only while the vehicle is parked While driving all handheld devices should be properly stowed and the flip pocket and the console lid should be closed 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CARGO AREA FEATURES argo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight If Equipped The dual function light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area and part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for a convenience SS RED RR ER DR RR EE ee N ie Re EE Cee ER DE DR RR RR RR RR IR DR N AE Re ee Ar Re RO ee NNSS RIEL seer eet ere oy US DE DR RR ER RR RR AS N N Se Ry Ha Ne Re ed RE RR EE DR PR RR RR RA RR DR EK Re Se Ry Pa Na Re ea RS Be Ee tra S ee ee OMM E LT ToS RM Nt e ixi dirasaad 2 SICHER Drm Mt a Da Da ha rrr us Press in on the flashlight to release it Press And Release N UNDERSTANDING
260. otection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling eguipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil or refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive c
261. ouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind his her back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under Engine Oil under Maintenance Proce dures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST
262. our wheels are off the ground Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transaxle will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing WHAT TO DO IN CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 324 W If Your Engine Overheats 324 W Automatic Transaxle Overheating 325 N Jacking And Tire Changing 326 Hack OCatiOM 2 5 19e se REELE wd 3 sues 326 Hiopare Ie SIOWage suis qu ua won denas s des s 326 O Preparations For Jacking 5 22292 R 327 EMERGENCIES D Jacking Instructions ll jump Starting Procedures N Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle o With Ignition Key 3 Without The Ignition Key 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the Hazard Warning flasher switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehic
263. p 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Integrated Power Module 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly insta
264. passenger and if equipped side airbags for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Even though you are an excellent driver buckle up even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown Fa 41 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden
265. peration of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch forward to the on position will isi cry SORS IE J Fold Down Speakers If Equipped When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down off the trim panel to face rearward for tailgating and other activities NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 activate the wiper The rear wiper operates in an inter mittent mode only Rotating the center of the switch all the way forward will turn on the wash function The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position posee errr EE Rear Washer Wiper Control If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to Park Rear Window Defroster The pushbutton is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob amp lcaadi Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster An amber light shows that the defroster is on The defroster will automatically turn off after 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the switch
266. ph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Programming Additional RKE Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in the RKE transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlo rate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 26 THING
267. phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone u for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio eguipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button e Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The uconnect phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the uconnect website for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio
268. pid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 260 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing w
269. ppear on the screen side of the radio faceplate 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 042305232 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to tum on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release i
270. r and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL or normal braking or pressing the clutch pedal while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning OFF the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is on speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is on push down and hold SET DECEL Release the Elec tronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Tapping the SET DECEL button once will res
271. r from entering the passenger compartment when in heat mode Positioning Slide Control Vehicles without air conditioning can use that space for storage The lower bin holds the Owner s Manual and other important documents Another storage bin is lo cated on the outboard side of the steering wheel and can hold small items like parking cards for easy access UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS N Instrument Panel Features 166 N Instrument Cluster Base 167 Bl Instrument Cluster Premium 168 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 169 W Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC I EQUIP PCG exo ecu abate wy ead dn ges ot ee ee 180 OOil Change Required i s aos da whee ed 182 OGEVIC FUnCHOMS 2229 9 3 uw Ve Se ER 183 XO Compass Temperature Audio 184 IH Average Fuel ECONOMY 2242224 a ees o Distance To Empty DTE E Elapsed Tie 212 dad R PERDE e Rn 185 D Tire Pressure Monitor IPM 185 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable SS lu ie AR N SA Rx SORS E aes obs 185 ll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX SACK be oe ewe eee eee HI EN OAR sees es 190 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 191 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video O Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files D List Button Disc Mode F
272. r type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next listenable station Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons CD Player Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This raad button does not function for all other radios CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents su
273. raad23 Panel 7 Airis directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Climate Control The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains R 134a a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer Bi Level in the upper atmosphere ub Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets The controls are as follows 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demister outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix He Air is directed through the floor defrost and side J window demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost GP Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost modes even if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel e
274. ransmissions Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When DRIVER S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driv er s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is se lected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until DRIVER S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS appears to make your selection Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds N UND
275. rap In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put Cargo Tie Down Loops heavier objects as low and as far forward as There are two D rings installed in the cargo area for possible securing cargo I Rear Cargo Area Continued 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be DER TT TE LE OMIE a Ln a come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision r1 To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying Fold Down Speakers purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer A switch on the right side of the steering column controls o
276. ress and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric Hons Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Maximum number of
277. ri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 031307152 Hood Release Lever Safety Catch 2 Move the safety catch located under the front edge of Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the left side right side the hood near the center and raise the hood facing hood of the engine compartment to secure the hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 8 in 20 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNINCG If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight
278. rials Added to SS SS SEE Es 346 Recommendation eR Gees Ko ee DU 345 377 SVOUMICHG PPP 346 MISCUSID uus E ww we tuu x edes EDE E eds 346 Onboard Diagnostic System o 341 342 TEM 420 INDEX NEE Id Opener Garage Door HomeLink 138 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Air Intake 122 deuda EE tubes tas 243 OVENI vis 257 Overheating Engine a ase od ice X oes 169 324 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 405 Patt 8 11 ICT 362 Panic N da AA AE ER EO EE ERG 24 Parkie Blake 22 saute SNR ADA PY ae d 264 Passie LIGUE vos ace qoa ae HER DRR foy A Ue RC Urt 130 Piso eo BH S s doi e vae EN BEE DE RD oye 185 POS ies aan ee ge eee ego ae eee ae 70 Phone Cellular as wese e gee eave odd wea as 83 Phone Hands Free uconnect 0 83 Placard Tire and Loading Information 279 Power Door LOCKS AE SE SEN ic 27 is ee AREA bah oben ORE EE Rg 81 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 148 Eet a xu BARE SORS eR P HER d DUE 262 263 DUDEODE 4 RR sg Vx 308 d 9 9 epe dd MES 144 WINGOWS SEER EE mam RE ERIT EAS REP 92 Power sieerine Paid suada EEG hoes 379 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 48 Preparabon Tor Jackie sae se EER Indeed tems 327 Pretensioners ogg e 46 Programmable Electronic Features 185 Radial LP HESS acide Sae e bci AAR REPERE 286 Radio OpPETANON EP 236 Radio Satellite uconnec
279. riving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Section 2 for more information 11 Oil Pressure Warning Light qi This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 12 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool el Pl If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats i
280. riving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T 3 N A N C E S C H 3 D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _I Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 393 M A N T z N A N C 3 S C H 3 D U L 3 S 0 394 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or Schedule 126 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate tires I Change the engine oil and engine oil Replace the engine air cleaner filter filter Inspect
281. rmation Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors f Equipped Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 021806138 Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Child Protection Door Lock Location Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged A 921806188 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down POWER
282. rongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 402 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City
283. rotection Continued l f The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be trig gered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arms If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passeng
284. rratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by com pleting one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE A good calibration reguires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map To Set the Variance with the ignition in the ON position with a short button press less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until you have displayed the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Program
285. rs and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Infants and Child Restraints There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old WARNING Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in
286. rson you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 Phonebook New Entry names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pag
287. ruc ture or frame You need proper knee impact protection in a e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket driving equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster Event Data Recorder EDR It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param works on your vehicle that it has airbags eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a guarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after air bag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavail able NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to cr
288. s 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or Schedule 78 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule d H Rotate tires l Change the engine oil and engine oil _J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary M A N T 3 N A N C E S C H 3 D U L z S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and en
289. s Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more that 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corro
290. s situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Iransfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions described in your ce
291. s 255 TEM ee Id General Information 18 112 301 General Maintenance 6444006454 SOR ose 344 Gloss CIENIE ka eaa EE EE KS EO OK 366 Glove Compartment s so quee che ER HEKS HE ei 160 Gross Axle Weight Rating 5 044424 42054865 310 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 308 310 Hands Free Phone uconnect 83 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow onding Waler ses ER ano don pa edam doe ano 260 Hazard Warming Flasher oce 4 RS ERROR LES 324 Head Best lS ce s udo cede toe a S RE RE qid aud 120 Ide ud BiS eacoanee d xay PES PIE aH RE 372 8 AE OE TRUE E E E ICE 366 FMC Beat xara qo wang EE MERE Hi GE d 129 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 129 Passe soe na E E a 130 Replacing OWI ea heirs atte oe OE AE AA KA AE N 126 Heated Seats ss EE 0c eee eee eee eee ee 120 Heater SS SS ee ee 236 Hitches Trader TOWNE 424424435 be REED oaks he es 212 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 138 Hood Release eee 124 ISOM PC 12 Key gutted eee tous odi e 12 Ignition Key Removal 2 40 ER bro rrii 12 Immobilizer Sentry Key sad ed qni ERES ge 15 Infant Restraint leen 63 Information Center Vehicle 180 Inside Rearview Mirror 00008 79 Instrument Cluster sui ows 9 wee ko oe Bo es 167 169 Instrument Panel and Controls 166 Instrument Panel Cover 367 Instrument P
292. s at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Illuminated Ap proach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows
293. s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor 9 408 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 410 INDEX NEE Id ABS Anti Lock Brake System 266 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 355 A boek ai EA a a DRR E ER EER 305 Adding Washer Fluid esa eese E none KA KERE 351 Additives Fuel 222 ot Rate y vuv YS 304 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 347 Air Conditioner Maintenance 349 DIL CONCIMOMING vius teere E PESE PT 236 Air Conditioning Controls uus shes cen wa 236 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 242 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 349 350 Air Conditioning System
294. s the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE GCWR ratings include a 150 Ibs 68 kg allow ance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either the front or rear GAWR E STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitc
295. shion Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Er sr NNMTLNNSNNMS Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat f A AA SR RE Be Pe Re SN Me ee te Sete ee RR ee ata tata at t aa aaa aa a EE EEPE EE PEPEE EPEE EEE Flat Front Passenger Seat Handle Fold NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 FREE ER EER Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area each rear seatback can MIS be folded forward Pull the strap forward to move the uu seat forward and flat ferry oe Re 2 LII OO rra cmm DLE X LJ frees Seer ee ERRORES DEERE Dr IlIIINNTENT DOELE EED TT TUMMMZXNXNNNNNERNA NN DE vul Rex Mim due Rear Seat Folded Flat Folding Rear Seat 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Reclining Rear Seat If Eduipped For additional comfort pull the strap forward just enough to release the seatback latch d 1 J 1 j d E IE od d T zr gor 4 EE j i a h Ee ea D ed D i e ie pa h T l Te i L i Reclining Rear Seat Strap Then push the seatback to a reclined position approxi mately 35 degrees maximum and release the strap WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be se
296. should not be used and they can cause damage to the player If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse but
297. sion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes of corrosion are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon metal and painted surfaces sibility of the owner e f you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well e f you drive on s
298. ssure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 294 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pres
299. sures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor STARTING AND OPERATING 295 NOTE e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure the tire or condition Base System e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge iN This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the while adjusting your tire pressure instrument cluster e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stem
300. switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands e Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e Previous Channel to select the previous channel e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels e Select Name to say the name of a channel e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands e Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track e Previous Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e New Memo to record a new memo During the e Delete All to delete all memos recording you may press the VR button to stop record ing You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording Play M
301. t TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to incre
302. t tended NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is reguired for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sen
303. t A the temperature control to its 81e35334 Coolest setting NOTE e Recirculation Mode will not operate in Floor Mix or Defrost modes e See Circulation Control in this section for proper or extended use of this position Air Filtration System If Equipped An air filter is included in the optional Security Group The filter media includes a particle filtration layer The filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricul tural smells The filter acts only on air coming from outside the vehicle it does not filter air inside the passenger compartment The air filter change interval coincides with engine oil and filter change intervals As with oil changes the interval is shorter for heavy duty service or dusty conditions Refer to Maintenance Schedule in Section 7 See your authorized dealer for service 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operating Tips N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Window Fogging Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the windows set mode to the mix or defrost position Direct the panel outlets toward the side windows Do not use recirculate without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by using the defrost position If the fogging problem persists clean the inside window surfaces The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect ing on the inside
304. t phone operating instruc tions for these radios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Version 0 96 or higher See the uconnect website for supported phones For uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 uconnect allows you to transfer calls between the sys tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular
305. t studios 229 Reat Eoo LIBRES ERK SE EES EE Rod lt 373 Rear Litedte 96dan s sirak raea a em ka a e a 34 kear oeat Folding 22324454 93 tures RR A 129 Rear Window Defroster x ese kai ME Be es 159 Rear Window Features 22 99x 9 e Se 4 158 N INDEX 421 Rear Wiper asiel gat ce msasa os pi EER fe 158 Recorder Event Data 00000 59 Recreational MOWING 04246440 MERS Hi DRA ae 921 IN usbinci MP P 350 Reminder Seat Belt SS SS SS A7 Remote Control Door LOCKS 2 099 ORE one aori EE HE 20 ecuri ALAT sa o wi den ER Pd e RAAS mg SE 18 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan este gie sos a Row 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 234 Replacement DUDS 1329360 SERS HEER Reps 371 Replacement KEYS a scs aa n DRA lee open aad 16 Replacement Pate uos aec op sr RD et RS 343 Replacement DIGS wes wars EV AD oa ades 290 Reporting Safety Defects sie sa ERK KAR aes 404 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 174 Restraints Child 45 522 E RE REO ER 62 68 Restraints Infant eese 63 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 155 Rotation Tires aaaea 292 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 79 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 73 Safety Defects Reporting iaa seek e RUE 404 Salety PXhaust OS 6444494 SEE SE SOS ronin 72 Safety Information DIG 24205550 ARE peri 274 ora IPS MP 71 Satellite Radio Antenna veas emn 251 Satellite Radio uconnect studios
306. t System BAS Traction Control System TCS and Electronic Stability Program ESP All systems work together to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in this section of the manual for more information about ABS Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase
307. te e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say e Press the PHONE button to begin EE Namies e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook de EA ee RECOGNITION button during the playing of the e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be desired name and say Call deleted NOTE The user can
308. te has no inside release mechanism PPP ZL Lll 1 OI VI TTE MN IS the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a ee pum NC snap in cap that provides access to release the latch in pass c the event of an electrical system malfunction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the BR Be Re Re sees ep EE OOIE ee MEE ee ere eun 2j vehicle Liftgate Handle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open NOTE make sure that all windows are closed and the e In the event of a power malfunction or the RKE climate control blower switch is set at high speed transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the DO NOT use the recirculation mode liftgate lock cylinder and turn it to the right manual lock models only Using the liftgate handle pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front
309. teering Fluid Check 263 3 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 279 M Parking Brake esses eese 264 W Tires General Information 283 O Tire Pressure 22x 39 99 9303 5 902 4 3 4 aM Brake Systemi 4 en SEA deeds Rua Edi ed 265 MEE 283 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 O Tire Inflation Pressures i229 284 2 lelik sa ea e EEE E ea OS 295 H Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 285 O Premium System If Equipped 297 ARAUA PIY Jes seisoen erir ERES 286 EGegeidl Miormatiom soas s m dere SEER ot 301 B Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 2905 WM Pte R eguiremenis ase voce wo een cese bar DER 301 O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 287 B Reformulated Gasoline 302 Pe DIE i 84 aded ha eg mre RERO RR 288 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends E Tread Wear Indicators sacer RES Tex 288 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles DLHE O TIO side Fed ade RUP RR gees 289 EMINET In Gasoline seecae ene deae ed EHSeplacerment Wes a scd aces oh ES et red 290 o Materials Added To Fuel Lis 304 NE UE Chi SOEN ES DR S RESET 22 E Fuel System Canons ss ve RU RE EE HA RR 304 Mo de ETT 291 H Carbon Monoxide Warnings 305 Mi Tire Rotation Recommendations 202 Nadine PUBL osse eee cep eke wees RR 305 ll Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 293 Fuel FillerCap Gas Cap g2ecauutiesaen 305 248 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 3 Loose
310. teering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals N VI A IN TE NANCE SCHEDULES 385 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter DI Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months M A l N T z N A N C E S C H 3 D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 386 MAINTENANCE S
311. teering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL 5 position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position 250 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds tum the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly so follow the procedure carefully See Section 6 of this manual for jump starting instructions Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an extern
312. tem VR refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES TM If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc AM FM CD DVD RADIO RER REN IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioni
313. the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH WARNING child restraint anchorage system e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they A rearward facing child restraint should only be should use a belt positioning booster seat The child used py a ee seat A rearward facing child re and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap straint in the front seat Her be struck by a deploy shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a ab Be air
314. the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or l
315. the normal high beams The DRL s will come on whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except for PARK NOTE The DRLs will automatically turn off when the turn signals or Hazard Warning flashers are in operation and automatically turn back on when the turn signals and Hazard Warning flashers are not operating WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS EX The wipers and washers are operated by a switch NS on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column Windshield Wiper Operation Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed unns A1918da9 Wiper Control 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the knob upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after th
316. the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the Music Type screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
317. the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the e ry NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of th
318. the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplan ing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents Continued 270 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP in this Section of this manual Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over steering or under steeri
319. ther straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your unattended child in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the ad
320. tion for more information 29 Transmission Temperature Indicator If Equipped During sustained high speed driving on hot days the automatic transmission oil may be come too hot If this happens the transmission overheat indicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transmis sion cools down enough to allow a return to the re quested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC If Equipped The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster E 14 F FM 101 1 10 041007204 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 The EVIC consists of the following System Status Vehicle information warning message displays Personal settings customer programmable features Compass heading Outside temperature display Trip computer functions uconnect phone displays If equipped Audio mode display Tire Pressure Monitor TPM When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after 1 mile 1 6 km of distance travelled Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single ch
321. tires Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar BREER REAAL TEES PPEP ETE Mp Loading SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 1 The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed 4 the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you AE AE n 3 adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflaion pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 4 Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION dM1D285a3 of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition t b809 gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear Tire and Loading Information Placard 280 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement Ihe combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX k
322. to Tires General Infor mation for the proper inspection procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion for proper tire replacement procedures Replac ing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 lbs 907 Kg 318 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident
323. to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 ooo 2 EVIC Button Press the EVIC button until one of the following func tions are displayed on the EVIC e Compass Temperature Audio e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty DTE e Elapsed Time e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM e Personal Settings To Reset The Display Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the EVIC button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function reset ALL will be displayed during this three second window 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Compass Temperature Audio Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in this section Average
324. to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom men
325. ton works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be
326. tor has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than e This vehicle has not been designed for use with specified Hybrid
327. try Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors hood liftgate and ignition switch for unauthoriz
328. ttn 79 HEper HO uox S9 spe DER EYE Bt ee nay 85 0 Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If E Phone Call Features 2 644 URE eR hehe 94 E E j D uconnect phone Features 96 LL EI en a O Advanced Phone Connectivity 101 O Outside Mirror Passenger s Side 80 7 Things You Should Know About Your O Power Mirrors If Equipped 81 conneci PRONE s 3 9 9i eu a9 RERO o4 103 o Vanity Mirrors If Equipped zx 83 O General Information ss sty moe AE oen Ee 112 H Sun Visor Sliding Feature sis nee ROEI 83 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ll Voice Recognition System VR O Folding Rear Seat orn esc aae t acs 123 HEUP is uq xx E dope EE ERU ed 112 2 Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped 124 5 Voice Recognition System VR Operation 112 ll To Open And Close The Hood 124 ACommands ee EE EE Ee ee ia EE EN EE N 126 O Voice Training Hy O Multifunction Lever SS SS 126 MSCS Sek eee EE HE EE NE EE 117 2 Headlights Parking Lights And Instrument O Front Seat Adjustment sss sext br eas 117 Danel ol aa oe aes as GRA D Hoare a IR 126 3 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If HEghts On Reminder usse son mes 127 PQUIDPCd is aen RR Mace RUE PRESE RS 118 5 Fog Lights If Equipped 128 O Manual Lumbar If Equipped 119 Turn Signals 0 00 esses 128 D Driver s Seatback Recline 119 5 High Beam Low Beam Select Sw
329. udio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Voice Tree Main Menu Call Towing Emergency English Phonebook Setup JConnect US Assistance E nol EE OES EE Tutorial Francais Last Fnter Enter Number Name Humber on Phong is redialed Deg Phonebook Flevwehart See Setup Flawe harl Number associated The 32
330. uld be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filtersfrom your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance interval maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to ass
331. ult in a WARNING 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you Manual Transaxle Pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed con trol A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to slippery be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s
332. unction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not 1 13 ey 1 D c Fal 13 a N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 at 1L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine as indicated by the range markings as described above on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for recommended engine oil change interva
333. ure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Continued after handling e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on t
334. utomatically retract Remove obstruction and press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the close position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Venting Sunroof Express Press and hold the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of the sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window
335. w petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid as seal damage will result Automatic Transaxle CVT If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid which has been formulated with special metal to metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and result in a complete transmission failure Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this sec tion for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked only by a trained technician Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the correct maintenance interval Special Additives Do not add any materials other than leak detection dyes to Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT Fluid 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CVIF 4 CVTF 4 is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Manual Transaxle If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluid
336. way Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 405 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals T
337. wing 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Without The lgnition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a removable plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The ignition key must be in the ON position to use the override lever MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 2 0L 339 Bl Engine Compartment 2 4L 340 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD IH 341 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 341 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance IPO PAESE DE AE eo Rm eon s di X Rae aen 342 W Replacement Parts 0 343 IM Dealer Service uiua mex xem SR EE RES 343 Bl Maintenance Procedures 344 EE pie Oi osse ARE ES bas m 344 Engine Ol Piller Pr PERE OT ee se 347 ELEngine Air Cleaner Filter a s 28030244064 347 O Maimtenance Free Battery i e ed es O Air Conditioner Maintenance ase Oe le dle le AE AE nog teem 2 eet o Windshield Wiper Blades 350 O Adding Washer Fluid 4 mt 4 951 ET dd Di BIO oxyde d seq vastes e 351 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id
338. without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if 4 equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Phone Button uconnect phone If Eguipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not avail
339. y an autho rized dealer 20 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 21 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 22 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are ON 23 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning ESP BAS UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several
340. ydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the brake warning indicator will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued ee STARTIN
341. ys on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6 Firmly press and release the Learn or Training wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is button The name and color of the button may vary by NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer door NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 3 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Bing Button To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the
342. zed discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton My withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radi

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

DVI KVM Extender- 2011-03 Guntermann & Drunck GmbH  Bedienungsanleitung Sony-Ericsson Z320i  VBOX Software Manual  the ukpms user manual  警告 注意 - Drum-tec  Origin Storage 120GB TLC SATA 2.5"  Téléchargez la version PDF  1 1  KP-41PX2 100 Hz Projection TV  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file